WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by
visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 or by contacting your dealer.
Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by
calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................72
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................89
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................137
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................157
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................203
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................221
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................267
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................273
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................278
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8
ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......................... 9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................13
Key Fob........................................................................ 13
SENTRY KEY .......................................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................16
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................................17
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 19
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped .................................................................. 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................19
To Arm The System ..................................................... 19
To Disarm The System................................................ 20
Rearming Of The System............................................ 20
Security System Manual Override.............................. 20
Tamper Alert................................................................ 20
DOORS ................................................................................ 20
Manual Door Locks......................................................20
Power Door Locks........................................................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ......................21
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped......23
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors ....23
STEERING WHEEL...............................................................24
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ..................................................................24
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped...................................................................24
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .......................25
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ................25
Programming The Memory Feature............................26
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory ............................................................26
Memory Position Recall...............................................26
SEATS...................................................................................26
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped...................................................................26
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................28
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped ........31
Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................32
Front Ventilated Seats —
If Equipped...................................................................33
Head Restraints...........................................................33
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................................35
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................35
Basic Voice Commands...............................................36
Get Started...................................................................36
Additional Information.................................................36
MIRRORS ............................................................................ 37
Inside Rearview Mirror................................................ 37
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................................... 37
Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 37
Outside Mirrors With Turn
Signal — If Equipped.................................................... 37
Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................................... 38
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................................... 38
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................................... 38
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................... 38
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 39
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 39
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 39
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 39
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 40
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 40
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 40
Security ........................................................................ 41
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 41
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 42
Multifunction Lever ..................................................... 42
Headlight Switch ......................................................... 42
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ................................. 43
High/Low Beam Switch............................................... 43
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ......................... 43
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 43
Automatic Headlights ................................................. 43
Parking Lights And Panel Lights................................. 43
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............................ 44
Headlight Delay........................................................... 44
Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 44
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................................ 44
Turn Signals................................................................. 44
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 44
Automatic Headlight Leveling —
If Equipped .................................................................. 44
Battery Saver............................................................... 45
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................45
Courtesy Lights............................................................ 45
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped.................. 45
Ambient Light — If Equipped ...................................... 46
Dimmer Control........................................................... 46
Illuminated Entry......................................................... 46
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................46
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................................... 47
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 47
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..................................... 48
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..........................................................48
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions.............................................................. 48
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)....................... 53
Climate Voice Recognition.......................................... 54
Operating Tips ............................................................ 54
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............................ 55
Storage .........................................................................55
USB/AUX Control ........................................................57
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped..............................59
Electrical Power Outlets ..............................................59
Power Inverter — If Equipped......................................61
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ........................61
WINDOWS ..........................................................................62
Power Windows............................................................62
Wind Buffeting ............................................................63
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED................................... 64
Opening And Closing The Sunroof..............................64
Sunshade Operation....................................................64
Pinch Protect Feature..................................................65
Sunroof Maintenance..................................................65
Ignition Off Operation ..................................................65
HOOD....................................................................................65
Opening The Hood .......................................................65
Closing The Hood.........................................................66
LIFTGATE..............................................................................66
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ......................................66
Cargo Area Features ...................................................67
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ...........................68
Deploying The Crossbars.............................................68
Stowing The Crossbars................................................70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................................................... 72
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................................ 73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY..................................... 73
Location And Controls ................................................. 74
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................................. 75
Display And Messages................................................ 76
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ................... 77
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped ..... 79
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 80
Red Warning Lights..................................................... 80
Yellow Warning Lights ................................................. 83
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................ 85
Green Indicator Lights................................................. 86
White Indicator Lights ................................................. 87
Blue Indicator Lights ................................................... 87
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .................... 87
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity.. 87
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................................ 88
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................................89
Automatic Transmission............................................. 89
Normal Starting .......................................................... 89
AutoPark ...................................................................... 90
Extended Park Starting............................................... 91
If Engine Fails To Start ............................................... 91
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ....92
After Starting ............................................................... 92
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......................92
PARKING BRAKE ...............................................................92
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION.............................................93
Ignition Park Interlock................................................. 94
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System ... 94
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ......................................... 94
8-Speed Automatic Transmission.............................. 94
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ...........................................97
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ........................................97
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions —
If Equipped .................................................................. 97
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped.. 98
Shifting Procedure ...................................................... 99
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED.............................................. 100
Guidelines For Track Use.......................................... 100
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 101
POWER STEERING........................................................... 101
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.......................... 102
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 102
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop.....102
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode.......... 102
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System ......... 103
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System.......... 103
System Malfunction.................................................. 103
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ............. 103
Cruise Control .......................................................... 103
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................................. 105
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................................ 113
ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 113
ParkSense Display.................................................... 113
ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 116
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ......................... 116
Operation With A Trailer ........................................... 116
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System............ 117
Cleaning The ParkSense System............................. 117
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 117
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ......................................... 118
LaneSense Operation............................................... 118
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .................................. 118
LaneSense Warning Message ................................. 119
Changing LaneSense Status.................................... 120
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .......................... 120
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ............................................... 121
VEHICLE LOADING .......................................................... 122
Certification Label..................................................... 122
TRAILER TOWING ............................................................ 123
Common Towing Definitions .................................... 123
Trailer Hitch Classification ....................................... 125
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .................................................................... 125
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped................................................................ 126
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...................................... 127
Towing Requirements .............................................. 127
Towing Tips ............................................................... 131
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....131
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........131
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models ..132
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) ...................................132
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case).......................................132
DRIVING TIPS....................................................................134
On-Road Driving Tips.................................................134
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................................135
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................................137
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................................137
UCONNECT SETTINGS ......................................................137
Customer Programmable Features..........................138
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...........................156
Radio Operation ........................................................156
Media Mode...............................................................156
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..................156
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........................156
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................157
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................157
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ............................157
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..................158
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................................162
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ............162
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation...165
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................167
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................ 170
Occupant Restraint Systems Features.................... 170
Important Safety Precautions .................................. 170
Seat Belt Systems .................................................... 170
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).................. 177
Child Restraints......................................................... 187
SAFETY TIPS .................................................................... 199
Transporting Passengers.......................................... 199
Transporting Pets ..................................................... 200
Connected Vehicles .................................................. 200
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ...................................................................... 200
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ................................................................201
Exhaust Gas .............................................................. 202
Carbon Monoxide Warnings..................................... 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .................................... 203
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED .................. 203
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..................................... 205
Preparations For Jacking.......................................... 206
Jack Location............................................................. 206
Spare Tire Stowage ................................................... 207
Spare Tire Removal................................................... 207
Jacking Instructions ................................................. 209
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 212
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 213
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 213
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ............... 214
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS........................................ 215
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ............................................... 216
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .......................................... 218
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..................................... 219
Rear-Wheel Drive Models......................................... 220
All-Wheel Drive Models............................................. 220
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) .. 220
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)..................................... 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 221
Maintenance Plan..................................................... 221
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 224
3.6L Engine............................................................... 224
5.7L Engine............................................................... 225
Checking Oil Level .................................................... 226
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 226
Maintenance-Free Battery ...................................... 226
Pressure Washing..................................................... 227
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................. 227
Engine Oil ................................................................. 227
Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 228
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 228
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................. 229
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 230
Body Lubrication....................................................... 231
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................... 231
Exhaust System ....................................................... 234
Cooling System ......................................................... 235
Brake System ........................................................... 237
Automatic Transmission ..........................................237
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................................238
Transfer Case ...........................................................238
Fuses..........................................................................239
Bulb Replacement.....................................................246
TIRES..................................................................................248
Tire Safety Information ............................................248
Tires — General Information ....................................255
Tire Types...................................................................258
Spare Tires — If Equipped.........................................259
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................................260
Snow Traction Devices..............................................261
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................262
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES ............................................................262
Treadwear..................................................................263
Traction Grades.........................................................263
Temperature Grades.................................................263
STORING THE VEHICLE ...................................................264
BODYWORK ......................................................................264
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................264
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................264
Preserving The Bodywork .........................................264
INTERIORS ........................................................................265
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................265
Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................265
Leather Surfaces.......................................................266
Glass Surfaces ..........................................................266
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 267
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................................ 267
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 267
Torque Specifications ...............................................267
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 268
3.6L Engine .............................................................. 268
5.7L Engine ...............................................................268
Reformulated Gasoline ............................................ 268
Materials Added To Fuel........................................... 269
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..................................... 269
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.............269
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .................. 270
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ................................. 270
Fuel System Cautions...............................................270
FLUID CAPACITIES ........................................................... 271
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................. 272
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................ 272
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE ........................................................................... 273
Prepare For The Appointment.................................. 273
Prepare A List............................................................ 273
Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 273
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 273
Roadside Assistance ................................................ 273
FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 275
FCA Canada Customer Care .................................... 275
Mexico ....................................................................... 275
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands........................... 275
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY).................................................. 275
Service Contract ...................................................... 275
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................275
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................276
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................276
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........276
In Canada...................................................................276
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................276
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................277
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................277
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure
you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision
Ú page 134.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the
topic.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See the following for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 80.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 80
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 81
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 81
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 81
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 81
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 81
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 82
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 82
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 82
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 82
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 82
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 82
Red Warning Lights
1
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 82
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 82
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 83
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 84
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 83
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 83
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 83
Red Warning Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 84
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 83
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 83
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 84
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 84
Service AWD Warning Light
Ú page 84
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 84
Yellow Warning Lights
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 83
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 83
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 84
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 85
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator Light
Ú page 85
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 85
Yellow Warning Lights
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 86
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 86
1
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 86
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 87
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Green Indicator Lights
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 87
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports Passive
Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
(if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote power
liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle moving
at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow
Ú page 277.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to
unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the doors
and the liftgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
the security system will arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open,
the doors will lock. The doors will unlock again auto-
matically if the key fob is left inside the passenger
compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 137.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
1 — Unlock
2 — Liftgate
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock
5 — Remote Start
6 — Panic
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the emergency
key release (1) on the back of the key fob and pulling the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a flat-blade screwdriver
or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of the key fob
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
(Continued)
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine
off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the
engine.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the
battery compartment does not close securely, stop using
the product and keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Igni-
tion, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check,
it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics.
In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 277.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows, etc.)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition position does not change with a push of the
ignition button, and the instrument cluster display message
“Key Fob Not Detected” is being displayed, the key fob may
have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side of the key fob (side opposite of the emergency key) against
the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the
ignition switch.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
NOTE:
For more information on normal starting procedures,
see
Ú page 89.
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in ON/
RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or
Accessory On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range Ú page 277.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock,
the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button
a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and with a
valid Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob in the vehicle, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition is in the OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a loca-
tion accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition
of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in
the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and sunroof (if equipped)
operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake pedal not pressed
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pressed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on
the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle
using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature.
Once the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions.
See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in
the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 137. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start
is activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode,
and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 48.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The
climate control settings will change if manually adjusted by the
driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit auto-
matic override. This includes the OFF button on the climate
controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled — Timer Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
system is armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The parking lights and/or turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. If any doors, windows, or sunroof are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 21.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry unlock door handle
(if equipped)
Ú page 21.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cylinder
when the alarm is armed will sound the alarm when the
door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed when the
power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button on the
key fob. If someone enters the vehicle through the
opened liftgate, then opens any door from the inside,
the alarm will sound.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the lift-
gate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and the
rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked unless all
doors are set to unlock on first press within Uconnect
Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the
vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door, push the
door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock
the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent.
To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door
trim panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switches
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device, the wireless signal may get blocked, and the
driver’s door may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position, and the driver's door is open, the
doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may
be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 137.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may block the key
fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry handle
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps)
for whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds. Passive Entry unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
will arm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a loca-
tion accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition
of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of the vehicle equipment may cause
severe person injuries and death.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the
driver’s door handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all doors and
the liftgate automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will
raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, depending on
the selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob
In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature, which will function if the ignition is in the OFF
position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel switch is
used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed,
the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any
valid Passive Entry key fob. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry
key fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the
Passive Entry system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors
and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt, ALL doors
will lock, and the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the
vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pull the electronic
liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped with
a power liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift
for manual liftgate vehicles.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open with the
handle and no key fob is required.
The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle
doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing the
electronic liftgate release, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked) must be
locked using the lock button on the key fob, the Passive
Entry lock button, or the lock buttons on the interior
front door panels.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the
right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE:
When you push the button on the liftgate, either only the
liftgate will unlock or all doors and the liftgate will unlock,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle,
push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the door handle lock button. This feature can be
turned on or off within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 137.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle or door handle
button. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle
is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle
unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
Close proximity to mobile devices can affect the
Passive Entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel
Ú page 277.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK ON EXIT
F
EATURE — IF EQUIPPED
If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 137, this feature will unlock all the doors when
any door is opened if the vehicle is in PARK.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up (unlocked position), lower the window, and
open the door with the outside door handle.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or
downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering
column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten
the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering
column control is located below the multifunction lever on
the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
saved positions
Ú page 25.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember
that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside
when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator
turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the center
of the instrument panel below the radio screen, and within
the Climate or Controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to program-
ming the memory settings.
The memory setting switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Setting Buttons
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type or material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio
station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will
display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 137.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the set (S) button on the memory switch. Then, within
five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your memory settings
by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds,
followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK,
a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
the desired memory button (1 or 2) or the unlock button
on the key fob linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing any of the
seat adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled, the
driver's seat and telescopic steering column (if equipped)
will stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front
of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback,
lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the recline
lever and push the seatback forward. To return to the seating
position, raise the seatback and lock it into place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
60/40 Split Rear Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW FOLD-FLAT SEATS
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Release Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to
lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted,
and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a
seat while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Tumble Pull Strap
Tumbled Second Row
TO RAISE REAR SEAT
Fold the seat rearward to its original position, and lock it into
place. Then lift the head restraint until it locks into place.
Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD-FLAT
SEATS
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Tumble Strap
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console, there
is a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access
the third row seats.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
TO RAISE REAR SEAT
Fold the seat rearward to its original position, and lock it into
place. Then lift the head restraint until it locks into place.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release handle
located on the back of the seat and lower the seat using
the pull strap located next to the release handle.
Release Handles
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Third Row Folded
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright position,
folded flat or tumbled when folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat. Then lift the head restraint
until it locks into place.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
using the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set posi-
tion when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or
RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for
Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each Driver Memory Setting
profile
Ú page 25.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or disabled)
through the programmable features in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 137.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system.
Press the heated seat switch once to turn the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat switch a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
Press the heated seat switch a third time to turn the LO
setting on.
Press the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated
seat switches that allow the rear passengers to
operate the seats independently. The heated seat
switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center
console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for off.
Push the switch once to turn the HI setting on.
Push the switch a second time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the switch a third time to turn the heating
elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system. The
fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED, and LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat switch a second time to
choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the
head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired
and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull
the top of the head restraint to the forward most position
and release. The head restraint will return to the rear most
position.
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not
adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the
rear seat is folded to a load floor position, but do not
return to their normal position when the rear seat is
raised. After returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place.
The outboard head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment.
Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it or push
downward on the head restraint to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see Ú page 170.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a collision.
Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their
upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when occupied,
or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To remove the head
restraint, raise it as far as it can go by pulling upward.
Then, push the release button at the base of the post while
pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see Ú page 170.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in REVERSE, the third row
head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect system.
Press the Controls button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button to power fold
the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
The head restraints can only be folded downward using
the Headrest Fold button. The head restraints must be
raised manually when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you
need to know to control your Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Voice Recognition
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
preceding reinstallation instructions prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered posi-
tion could result in serious injury or death in a collision.
Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
preceding reinstallation instructions prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any point
while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5 NAV With
10.1-inch Display, say the vehicle’s Wake Up word,
“Hey Uconnect”. After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake Up word
is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command. You can also say the vehicle Wake Up word
and state your command. Some examples of Wake Up
words include “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Dodge”.
A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on the
radio status bar to also issue a command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 277.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit
https://www.driveuconnect.ca/
en/sirius-xm-guardian
or call: 1-877-324-9091
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display:
Push The Voice Recognition Button To Start A Phone Call,
Begin Radio, Media, Navigation (If Equipped) And
Climate Functions, Or Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recognition
Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Climate, Start
Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles Not
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button To
Answer An Incoming Phone Call
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at
the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate
to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. Some
vehicles may be equipped with an auto dimming mirror
with no on/off button in the mirror. If that is the case,
the mirror will default to auto dimming on and the feature
can be disabled in the radio though the button on the
touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
S
IGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the lower outer
corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s side outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror.
The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare
when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
Power Mirror Switch
Power mirror positions can be saved to a Driver Memory
Settings profile (if equipped)
Ú page 25.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 48.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door openers,
motorized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active
Ú page 277.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the
Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the
device you are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device.
The button may not be immediately visible when looking at
the device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in before
moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final steps.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 39. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need
to be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined
area while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas
from your vehicle contains carbon monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to be
severely injured or killed.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink®
has successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly
when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot
be erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter.
Do not program the transmitter if people, pets or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only
use this transmitter with a garage door opener that
has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety features.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel lights
position to the first detent to turn on headlights, parking lights,
and instrument panel lights. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent for the AUTO position.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Fog Light Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Fog Light Switch
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever
the engine is running. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the parking brake
is engaged. The headlight switch must be used during
normal nighttime driving.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides
increased forward lighting at night by automatically controlling
the high beams through the use of a camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned
on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto Dim High Beams”
within your Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 137, as well as
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure
proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity
Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity
Control (not recommended), toggle high beam lever six full
on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. System will
return to default setting upon ignition off.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay
on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into
the OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 137.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the
O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the
instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not
Ú page 46.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds.
This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning the headlight switch on then
off, or by placing the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle
will chime when the driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by pushing fog light button on
the headlight switch.
Fog Light Operation
Fog Light Operation (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very
fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam
in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any door is left
open or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the
dome light on position, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn
off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and
left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the
exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control is rotated to
its upward most position. If your vehicle is equipped with a
key fob and the unlock button is pushed, the courtesy and
dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the O (off) position, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s
battery.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side
of the console. These buttons are backlit for nighttime
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time.
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AMBIENT LIGHT — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light illuminates for improved visibility of the
floor and center console area.
Ambient Light
DIMMER CONTROL
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter)
or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you
can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip
odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to its upward most position until you hear a click.
This is useful when headlights are required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
When programmed with the Uconnect system, the
headlights and courtesy lights will turn on when you
use the key fob to unlock the doors or open any door
Ú page 137.
The time the lights stay on is programmable up to
90 seconds. The lights will fade to off after the
programmed time, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position
from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated to the upward most position, past the
detent. The overhead and door courtesy lights will turn
off after 10 minutes when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated all the way
downward to the O (off) position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed while
in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several cycles after the end of the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several cycles, then
turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the washer will resume normal operation.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 231.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of four detent positions to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive.
Setting three is preferred by the average driver during
normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce
Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
1 — Push End Of Lever And Hold For Front Washer
2 — Rotate Downward For Mist
3 — Rotate For Rear Wiper/Washer Operation
4 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
is in the ON position, and the gear selector is in
NEUTRAL, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of NEUTRAL.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the third detent to activate the washer.
The washer will continue to operate as long as
the switch is held.
Rotate the center portion downward from the OFF position
to activate the rear washer. The washer will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the
“park” position.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Temperature
Controls
Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display Temperature Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will
turn off.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the
radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the
system between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can
be deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation mode
may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Recirculation mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling, dehumidi-
fication, etc.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the current setting.
The AUTO button automatically controls
the interior cabin temperature by adjusting distribution
and amount of airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
active during AUTO operation to improve performance.
Performing this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes. AUTO mode
is highly recommended for efficiency
Ú page 53.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or
push and release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode.
The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when the
Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the Front Defrost
mode button, the climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the button
on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the Down button on the faceplate or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle
the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front passenger temperature
and rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower settings
with the driver temperature, mode, and blower settings.
Changing the front passenger temperature or rear passenger
temperature, mode, and blower settings while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the
blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing the Mode button on the
faceplate, or one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen to change the airflow distribution
mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Rear Controls
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display
Rear Controls
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen to
display the rear climate controls. The control functions
now operate the rear system.
Press the Front Climate button on the touchscreen to
return to the front climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access
the rear climate controls. The Rear Climate
indicator will illuminate when the rear climate
controls are ON.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting.
The REAR AUTO indicator will illuminate when
REAR AUTO is on. This feature automatically
controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting
airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will
cause the rear system to switch between manual mode
and automatic modes
Ú page 53.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out the rear
manual temperature controls from adjusting the
rear temperature and blower settings. The LOCK
REAR indicator will illuminate when LOCK REAR is
on. Press and release this button again to exit the feature.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release to return to the Front Climate
Control Screen.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC (or SYNC To Driver) button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off.
The SYNC indicator will illuminate when SYNC is on.
SYNC is used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature, mode, and
blower settings with the driver temperature, mode, and blower
settings. Changing the front passenger temperature or rear
passenger temperature, mode, or blower settings while in SYNC
will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the rear climate
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using
the buttons on the touchscreen. Use the small blower icon
(or blower icon with the downward arrow) to reduce the
blower setting, and the large blower icon (or blower icon
with the upward arrow) to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR MODE CONTROL
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change the
airflow distribution mode. The rear airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the headliner outlets, the floor outlets or both.
HEADLINER MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side shuts off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode.
In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both the
headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON
To manually set the rear blower controls to off,
press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
button.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped
The rear system temperature controls are located on the
headliner over the second row seating area.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the third row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
AUTO BUTTON
Turn the blower knob to the AUTO setting.
This feature automatically controls the rear
interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow
distribution and amount. Changing the blower
knob to any other blower setting will cause the rear system
to switch to manual mode
Ú page 53.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Turn the rear temperature knob to adjust the temperature.
Turn the knob to the right (clockwise) to raise
the temperature.
Turn the knob to the left (counterclockwise) to
lower the temperature.
The rear temperature setting is displayed in the control
head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Turn the rear blower knob to regulate the
amount of air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed increases
as you move the knob clockwise from the off
position. The rear blower setting is displayed in the control
head.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
REAR MODE CONTROL
Turn the rear mode knob to adjust airflow
distribution. The rear mode settings are
displayed in the control head. The rear airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the headliner outlets, the floor outlets, or both.
HEADLINER MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and
the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK
The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the
control head is illuminated when the rear
controls are locked by the front system.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control
when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center of
the vehicle.
Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the Rear
Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob coun-
terclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
C
ONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel and the word
“AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display, along
with two temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automatically
regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode
and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower knob setting.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be
manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 264.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control system through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the passenger second row door. Do not
block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille
or heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower
storage compartment.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to flush
out the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to (Mix
Mode) and turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix Mode).
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided
for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the
push cover on the door to open. Push the push cover on
the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower
storage compartment.
Storage Compartment Latches
NOTE:
Lower storage compartment light is always on with ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted forward.
Push in the release button located on the back of the lid.
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders or
devices with cords routing through upper storage area.
Damage may occur to upper console lid and device cables
when upper storage compartment is lifted forward.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
When lifted forward, there is access to the lower storage
compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
NOTE:
When the lower storage compartment is accessed, it
allows the armrest to flip forward for Fold-Flat mode.
Fold-Flat mode allows the console armrest to be lowered
below the Fold-Flat seat plane and protects the armrest
vinyl from damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Fold-Flat Mode
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
front of the console.
Console Cubby Bins
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner, is
located in the front of the console.
Console Cubby Bin
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting The AUX Audio Input Or
External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an external USB
device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port which is
located in the center console.
The USB ports on the media hub are equipped with a
Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator (Smart Charge)
feature. This feature allows a device to charge for
up to one hour after the vehicle is powered off.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s USB control system (an external USB device
may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device
starts charging and is ready for use.
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin
charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C and
Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the same
time but cannot be used simultaneously while playing
media. When both Type C and Type A charge-only USB
ports are in use they will be charged at a reduced rate.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the USB control system until a
minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device
connected to the USB control system may charge it to the
required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB port:
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information may
not be present on the radio display.
The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the contents.
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
NOTE:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second Row USB Charging ports can be used for charging
purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an
external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging ports
which are located either on the rear of the front center
console and/or in the second row center console.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
Second Row Center Console USB Port
1 — Mini-USB Type C Port
2 — Standard USB Type A Port
3 — AUX Port
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front
passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with a light ring
that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers.
The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control
Ú page 46.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are connected
directly to the battery, and are powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13 Amp) at
12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the
fuse protecting the system needs to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located to the right of the climate
controls.
Front Power Outlet
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there may also be a
power outlet located in the storage area of the center
console.
Front Center Console Outlet — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console,
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage
area of the rear full center console.
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the power outlet right
rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from fuse
location F90 to F91.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear
Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wireless
charging pad located below the center stack by the
cupholders. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly
charge your Qi® enabled mobile phone. Qi® is a standard
that allows wireless charging of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see
your phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object is
detected.
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
The wireless charging pad will not work if any of the
four doors or the liftgate are open, even if the engine is
running.
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone is
connected to a wired charger.
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When the
software is active, the rate of charge is slowed down to
protect the device.
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging coils
of the system. Movement of the phone during charging
may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
Having multiple applications open on the phone while
charging will reduce the charging efficiency, and may
even shut down an application that is actively running
(i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also cause the phone to
overheat.
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods to
prevent the phone from overheating during charging
such as slowing down the rate of charge. In certain
instances, the device may shut down for a brief period
of time (when the device reaches a certain tempera-
ture). If this happens, it does not mean there is a fault
with the wireless charging pad. This may just be a
protective measure to prevent damage to the phone.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The power window controls are located on the driver's
door trim panel.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
The power window controls remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the
OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel
this feature.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing
the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
Both the driver and front passenger window switches have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — Driver And
Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-Up, it will
reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto-Up. If this
happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold
it to close the window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may
need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button. To enable the
window controls, push and release the window lockout
button again.
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not
let children play with power windows. Do not leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second; the sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop at full open position.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward; the sunroof and
sunshade will open and automatically stop at full open
position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will
close from any position and stop at a full closed position.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in
a partially opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of sunroof
position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.
Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
WARNING!
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of
the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch can remain active in Acces-
sory Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the
vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
system
Ú page 137.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the sunroof is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the top’s
path before closing.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the
crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from its
own inertia.
LIFTGATE
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the liftgate release handle Ú page 21 or by
pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push
the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open or close the power liftgate.
NOTE:
When using the liftgate button on the key fob to open
the liftgate while the vehicle is locked, only the liftgate
will unlock leaving the other doors to remain locked.
Closing the liftgate will not relock the liftgate. The lock
button on the key fob, or the Passive Entry lock button
must be pushed to relock.
If the electronic liftgate handle is used to open the lift-
gate and all the doors unlock, the liftgate and vehicle
doors must be locked again. Use the key fob, Passive
Entry lock button, or the power door lock switches on
the front door panels.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, it can be closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear trim
panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the button again
will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate
is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled
in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be
audible. The chime can be turned on or off through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 137.
NOTE:
In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power
liftgate functionality.
NOTE:
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in
gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power lift-
gate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple
obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will auto-
matically stop and must be opened or closed manually.
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
If the liftgate is only partially open, push the liftgate
button on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
If the liftgate release handle is pushed while the power
liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to
allow manual operation.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers
could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
(Continued)
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor.
To access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Load Floor Handle
Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle, and pull it over
the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover
in place.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop
and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the
cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when
taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must
not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within
the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
Roof Rack
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or
behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
WARNING!
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2. Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by
sliding the crossbar towards the center of the roof.
Repeat with the crossbar on the opposite side.
Removing Crossbars
3. Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot
supports at each end.
Bending Pivot
4. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure
the letters on the crossbars align with the matching
letters on the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
5. Slide the crossbar into the deploy position by moving
it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure
the crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar
pushed as far into the slot as possible. Once the
crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb screws
completely.
Installing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete
the deployment of the crossbars.
Deployed Crossbars
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away
from the matching letter to remove it from the
deployed position. Repeat with the other crossbar.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
(Continued)
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on
the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption
of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle,
DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal
area should be secured to both the front and rear of
the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION!
2
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed
in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
4. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 73.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located
Ú page 121.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
Opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed
to display important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show how systems are working and give you
warnings when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats
Ú page 235.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing
the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Left Arrow Button
Push the
left arrow button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the
OK button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illumi-
nate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for non
critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and white for
on demand information.
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus avail-
able, the position within the submenus is shown here.
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy, Time, Trailer Trip and Gain)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop-up
messages fall into several categories:
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most
of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as
the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.
Examples of this message type are “Right Front Turn
Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Exam-
ples of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn
signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the
vehicle with the lights on).
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the igni-
tion is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type
are “Remote Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and “Press
Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On.”
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or
arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the
OK
button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine must be off
with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five seconds),
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
If necessary, repeat this procedure.
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green or red telltales area on the right.
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Anti-lock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off
Cruise Ready ACC Override Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Service Shifter Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) Service Tire Pressure System
Park Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Engine Temperature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Ignition or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Service Air Bag System
Service Air Bag Warning Light Door Open Liftgate Open
Hood Open Shift Not Allowed Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Service Transmission
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the main
menu items for several features. Use the
up
and
down
arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive display
menu options until the desired menu is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may
vary.
Main Gauge
Speedometer
Push and release the
up
or
down
arrow button until
the main gauge menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
left
or
right
arrow
button to select the analog or digital type speedometer display.
Push and release the
OK
button to toggle units (mph or km/h)
of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the
left or right
arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner
of the icon.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To XX” is
displayed with the vehicle icon and the tire pressure values
in each corner of the icon with the pressure value of the low
tire are displayed in a different color than the other tire pres-
sure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function, and cannot
be reset
Ú page 167.
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the battery.
Performance Features — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Performance Features icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left or right arrow button to scroll through the
performance feature submenus.
The Performance Features include the following:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Current
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for off-highway or
track use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Current
Reaction Time — If Selected
0-60ft Duration
Best
Last
Current
Reaction Time — If Selected
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Current
Reaction Time — If Selected
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Current
Reaction Time — If Selected
Braking Distance
Distance
From Speed
Current G-Forces
Peak G-Forces
Lap Timer
Lap History
Will list the last four laps with the best lap high-
lighted in green.
Top Speed
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display then use the
left or right
arrow button to choose adaptive cruise control or
LaneSense
Ú page 105.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title is highlighted.
Push the
left or right arrow button to scroll the
submenus, one with current fuel economy display and one
without it.
Current MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
Average MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
Range to empty
Press the
OK button to reset the average fuel economy
NOTE:
The Range to empty feature is not able to be reset through
the instrument cluster display controls.
Trip
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, then push and release the
left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button on the steering wheel to see the
Stop/Start status in the driver interactive
display
Ú page 102.
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left or
right arrow button to select Trailer Trip or Trailer Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the following:
Distance
NOTE:
Press and hold the
OK button to reset all the information.
Trailer Brake will display the following:
Output
Type
Gain
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name, Artist
name, and audio source with an accompanying graphic.
Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the
left or right arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up
or
down
arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button
to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
Current Gear
On
Off
Gear Display
Full
Single
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the
OK button to
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Defaults
Restore
Cancel
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 81.
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
(RTE)
Fuel Economy
Average
Fuel Economy
Current
Trip A Trip B
Trailer Trip Gain
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Driver Assist
(Show/Hide)
Stop/Start
Vehicle Info
Fuel Economy
(Show/Hide)
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
(Show/Hide)
Performance –
If Equipped
(Show/Hide)
Trip (Show/Hide)
Audio
(Show/Hide)
Stored
Messages
Screen Setup
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster and Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power
to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger
than the capability of the charging system. The charging
system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips, and if
the evaluation and driving pattern of the vehicle did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in
all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first
if applicable. The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled.
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt
is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú
page 170.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault
with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag
has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the
brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN
position. The light should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake
is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system Ú page 101.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or
until the engine is able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 215.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected
Ú page 127.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause
the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow
when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker.
The warning light will flash when the vehicle is
crossing the lane marker
Ú
page 118.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 226.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime
will sound. The light will remain on until fuel is
added.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 165.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service Ú page 105.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Cruise Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the AWD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. AWD Low is designed for loose, slippery
road surfaces only
Ú page 97.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning is off
Ú page 165.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power
transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the
front and rear driveshafts are disengaged from
the powertrain.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding
sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment
tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it
is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 105.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is not detected
Ú page 105.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 103.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
Ú page 42.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is armed and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 118.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
Ú page 42.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is active
Ú page 97.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
Ú page 102.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the
turn signal indicator will flash independently and
the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will
flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
Ú page 105.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set Ú page 103.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready
to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú
page 118.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that
the high beam headlights are on. With the low
beams activated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on
the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward
the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high
beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be driveable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 137.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should connect
equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read
the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
3
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
89
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside
and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present,
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P)
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The ignition will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
will display a “
Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the
ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may
AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
To change the ignition positions without starting the vehicle and
use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
Ú page 73.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
the vehicle in PARK (P) if the following conditions occur.
It is a back-up system and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from ON/RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine will
turn off and the ignition switch will change to the ACC position.
After 60 seconds, the ignition switches to OFF automatically,
unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is
blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift To
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both of
these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until
you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and
on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the “Extended
Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal
Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not experienced an
extended park condition as defined previously, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while the engine is cranking. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. The starter motor will
engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage.
Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and brake
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú
page 212.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local
traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open
throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades see
Ú
page 272.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break-in period.
Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK (P) position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking
brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully. To release
the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking
brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N) if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control
of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in
or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn
the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P) before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps
the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is
OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle's
overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions.
Push the ECO button in the center stack of the instrument
panel to enable or disable ECO mode. Or ECO mode can be
enabled or disabled through your Uconnect system.
ECO OFF Button
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) mode is enabled, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later.
The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib-
ited based on temperature and other factors.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both on the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, push the lock button on the gear selector and move
the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore,
the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector posi-
tion and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver
selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE (D) when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control.
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in
the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position), or
tapping the paddle shifters (+/-) (if equipped) will manually
select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear
in the instrument cluster
Ú
page 97.
Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it
is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside
the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster
(as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting
the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with the electronically shifted
transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in AWD
AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD Control Switch.
Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light is NOT illuminated.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
1 — Gear Selector
2 — Lock Button
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK (P) if you must exit
the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 97. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature
as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time
of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency.
Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Manual (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also
known as AutoStick mode
Ú page 97). Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is
activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only
in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance
may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some
situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate
what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer):
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you
visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience.
An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be
reset, authorized dealer service is required.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to
coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your
response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 131.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 219.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
MANUAL position), or the paddle shifters to the MANUAL
(M) position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), or tap one of
the paddle shifters on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-)
paddle shifter to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+)
to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear.
The current transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE:
The paddle shifters (if equipped) may be disabled using
the Uconnect Personal Settings.
AutoStick mode has the following operational benefits:
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in SECOND
gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed, or holding the gear
selector in the (-) position, will downshift the transmis-
sion to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE (D) position, or press and hold the (+) paddle
shifter until "D" is indicated in the instrument cluster. You
can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode feature.
The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all
set to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified transmission
shift points for an enhanced driving experience, as well
as greater amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the SPORT button
on the instrument panel switch bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
SINGLE-SPEED OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time
All-Wheel Drive (AWD). No driver interaction is required.
The Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines
standard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance
to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque
transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
This system is not appropriate for conditions where AWD
LOW is recommended
Ú page 135.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE — IF EQUIPPED
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and it is
operated by the AWD control switch, which is located on
the center console.
AWD Control Switch
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
positions:
All-wheel drive auto range (AWD AUTO)
All-wheel drive low range (AWD LOW)
N (Neutral)
When additional traction is required, the transfer case AWD
LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This is accomplished by pushing the AWD LOW switch
Ú
page 99. The AWD LOW position is designed for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the AWD LOW position on
dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator message (AWD LOW)
is located in the instrument cluster and indicate the
current and desired transfer case selection
Ú page 73.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
position indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain on.
If shift conditions are not met, one or more of the following
events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case
will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met
Ú page 99.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the all-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline
components.
When operating your vehicle in AWD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the AWD AUTO
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case position, see the following:
AWD LOW
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts
together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering down
the vehicle if the “SERV AWD” Warning Light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
N (Neutral)
This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle Ú page 131.
SHIFTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case posi-
tion have not been met, the transfer case will not shift.
The position indicator light for the previous position will
remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected
position have been met. To retry a shift: return the control
switch back to the original position, make certain all shift
requirements have been met, wait five seconds and try the
shift again.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position
have been met, the current position indicator light will turn
off, the selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is
complete, the position indicator light for the selected posi-
tion will stop flashing and remain on.
AWD AUTO To AWD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of AWD LOW some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the AWD LOW control switch.
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition in ON/RUN position and engine
running, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push the AWD LOW control switch.
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
If steps 1 or 2 of either the “Preferred” or “Alternate Proce-
dure” are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they
no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process,
the desired position indicator light will flash continuously
while the original position indicator light is on, until all
requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
N (Neutral) Shift Procedure
For information regarding the transfer case N (Neutral)
shift procedure
Ú page 133.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position without first fully engaging the parking brake.
The transfer case N (Neutral) position disengages both
the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED
Tow N Go combines the capabilities of the vehicle control
systems, along with driver input, to provide optimum
performance for road conditions.
Push any one of the four drive mode buttons to select the
desired mode.
Drive Mode Buttons
Tow N Go consists of the following positions:
TRACK
– Optimizes settings for transmission, engine,
driveline, and suspension in order to maximize vehicle
performance. Also the electric power steering offers more
feedback of the tire gripping the road. This feature will reset
to AUTO upon an ignition cycle. To turn off Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)
Ú
page 160.
SPORT – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Perfor-
mance based tuning that provides a rear-wheel drive
feel but with improved handling and acceleration over
a two-wheel drive vehicle. This feature will reset to
AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
TOW
– TOW drive mode also optimizes the transmission
shifting for towing, as well as maximizing straight line trac-
tion by optimizing driveline settings on AWD system. Use
this mode for towing/hauling. Vehicle suspension will go to
SPORT mode. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is always enabled
in all drive modes provided that the ESC OFF indicator light
is not illuminated. TSC is disabled when the ESC OFF lamp
is illuminated. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an igni-
tion cycle.
SNOW
– Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off-road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an
ignition cycle.
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE
NOTE:
The standard Black Brembo Brake Pads are not recom-
mended for track use. Only the Red Brembo Performance
SRT brake pads are appropriate for track use.
If your vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they will
alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving situa-
tions. It is recommended that your vehicle operates in
SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event.
Prior to each track event, verify all fluids are at the
correct levels.
Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear brake
pads have more than half pad thickness remaining.
If the brake pads require changing, complete a brake
burnish procedure prior to track outing at full pace.
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for extended track
usage due to increased thermal capacity.
At the conclusion of each track event, it is recom-
mended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to
maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your
Brembo High Performance brake system.
It is recommended that each track outing should end
with a minimum of one cooldown lap using minimal
braking.
It is recommended to check oil temperature after each track
session. If the oil is still above 225°F (107°C), do another
cooldown lap if possible, or keep the engine running and let
idle until below 225°F (107°C), in order to prevent heat
soaking of the engine. Ensure temperature is reducing and
do not leave vehicle gauges unattended while idling just
after a track session.
It is recommended that the suspension system, brake
system, prop shaft, and half shaft boots be checked for
wear or damage after every track event.
Track usage results in increased operating tempera-
tures of the engine, transmission, driveline and brake
system. This may affect Noise Vibration Harshness
(NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle.
New components may need to be installed to return
the system to the original NVH performance.
1 — TRACK
2 — SPORT
3 — TOW
4 — SNOW
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
Tire pressure:
Recommended tire pressure of 33 psi (230 kPa)
when tires are cold, or below 42 psi (290 kPa)
when hot.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target below 42 psi (290 kPa)
when tires are hot at the conclusion of each track session.
Starting at 33 psi (230 kPa) cold and adjusting based
on ambient and track conditions is recommended.
Tire pressure can be monitored via the instrument
cluster display and can assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for
factory-installed components or when new brake
friction components are installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at 75%
speed. Brake at approximately 0.60 - 0.80g max without
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) intervention.
2. Complete one lap in this manner until you start smelling
the brakes. Continue for another half lap at speed,
then complete a two lap cooldown with minimal brake
applications. Ensure the brakes are not smoking. If they
are, complete another cooldown lap.
3. Getting the brakes to smoke is an indication that the
brakes have overheated and may negatively affect
future track usage.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool for at least 30 minutes.
If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow rotors to
cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before returning to the track.
5. There should be a thin layer of ash when inspecting
the brake pads. Having the ash layer go more than
half the thickness of the pad material is a sign of an
overly aggressive burnish.
6. Occasionally, a second burnish session is required. If the
brake pads begin to emit an odor during the next track
session, reduce vehicle speed and braking deceleration
rate to burnish targets and follow steps 2-4.
7. New brake pads installed on old rotors require a
burnish. New rotors installed with old brake pads
should be burnished at the track or driven for
300 miles (485 km) of city driving to develop an
adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface
prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced.
NOTE:
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it removes
mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal capacity. Resurfacing
also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing
the likelihood of pulsation in further track use.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full function-
ality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The power
steering system adapts to different driving conditions and
adjusts accordingly.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
Ú page 137.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed
and the “Service Power Steering” or the “Power Steering
Assist Off – Service System” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service
Ú page 80.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “Power Steering
System Over Temp” message is displayed on the instrument
cluster screen, this indicates an over temperature condition in
the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe,
pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the
icon and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to
handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
Ú page 73.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a
STOP/START READY state under more extreme
conditions of the items previously listed.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
S
TOP/START SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank).
The light on the switch will illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF”
message will appear in the instrument cluster display and the
autostop mode will be disabled
Ú
page 73.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
S
TOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “Service Stop/
Start System” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 80.
If the “Service Stop/Start System” message appears in
the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating
what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with the set
speed, will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing
the set speed from memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
(Continued)
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position will erase the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
Ú page 103.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 277.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
two seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be
applied manually. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING!
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase Button
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release.
The instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the
ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not enabled), the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h)
when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will
cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or SET (-)
button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, your vehicle
will release the brakes two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead.
This distance setting appears in the instrument cluster
display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light. The system
will then adjust the vehicle speed automatically to
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 107.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the
driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its
maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC
continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged
and following a vehicle, the system will provide an
additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist
in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and
will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will resume motion,
without any driver interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
The driver must now manually operate the vehicle’s
accelerator and brakes.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display this message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
warning will display, and a chime will sound when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs
at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog.
The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on
the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display reads
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs,
try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues.
In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver
needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes when
ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in
which you are traveling. In the following lane changing example,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may
not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to
take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles.
For example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped
vehicle a stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear, and if equipped,
the front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking function
by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch.
The driver can also override automatic braking by
changing the gear or by pressing the gas pedal over
90% of its capacity during the braking event.
Automatic emergency braking is not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic emergency braking will not be available if
there is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
The automatic emergency braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to
avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
The automatic emergency braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move toward the
rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
The automatic emergency braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic emergency braking function through
ignition cycles.
The rear automatic emergency braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The rear automatic emergency braking system is for
emergency braking to avoid an imminent collision. It is
designed to assist the driver and not to substitute the
driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see
Ú page 117.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h)
or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
A display warning will appear in the instrument cluster display
if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds 7 mph
(11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
Six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia/bumper
(if equipped) and six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is
not equipped with front sensors) located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The front sensors detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
If the radio is on, ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
Ú page 137.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 73. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound
and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system
Ú
page 137.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the
system, the LED light on the switch will be illuminated.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system,
the instrument cluster will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be
displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. When the system
is disabled due to a fault, the LED light on the switch will
be illuminated. If the driver tries to press the ParkSense
switch to activate the system, the button will blink for
five seconds to show the request was received, but cannot
be fulfilled.
OPERATION WITH A TRAILER
For vehicles equipped with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Module (ITBM), the operation of the rear sensors is
automatically deactivated when the trailer's electric plug
is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The front
system is still functional, and the arcs will be overlaid with
a “Trailer” message. The rear sensors are automatically
reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.
When the vehicle is connected to a trailer, the instrument
cluster display will show the "Rear ParkSense Unavailable
Trailer Connected" message in the following situations:
For five seconds at vehicle start up
For five seconds when the ParkSense button is
pushed, as long as an object is not detected in the front
As long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (vehicle graphic
displayed with a trailer overlay)
NOTE:
For more information on the Integrated Trailer Brake
Module, see Ú page 128.
For vehicles not equipped with ITBM, the automatic
braking may falsely be applied if a trailer is hooked up, and
Park Assist is not manually deactivated. It is also possible,
the trailer may be mistaken as a close object.
WARNING!
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/
bumper when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a fault condition, the instrument cluster will actuate
a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
has detected a fault condition, the instrument cluster display
will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
pop-up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle
graphic will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front
or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is
detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the
side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt
the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in
the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstructions and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display,
see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within
the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver
continues to drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system
provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides visual warnings through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within
the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic
or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provide an audible warning to
the driver if removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on
or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense
in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking
has been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
lane line flashes yellow (on/off), and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line With
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is on to provide visual warn-
ings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left lane line will turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Line With Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line With Flashing
Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 137.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Vehicle Menu button located at the
bottom of the Uconnect display. Then select the
Controls tab.
2. Press the Rear View Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
3. Alternatively, the Rear View Camera feature can be
enabled by pressing the Rear View Camera button in
the App Drawer.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 137. In certain radio configura-
tions, these modes of operation will be found in the
Camera section of the vehicle settings menu.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears. When the vehicle is shifted out
of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the following
conditions occur: the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
X button to disable the display of the Rear View Camera is
pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking
or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate
the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Rear View Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or DRIVE,
the Rear View Camera can be activated with the
Rear View Camera button in the Controls tab of the
Vehicle Menu. This feature allows the customer to
monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if
equipped) for up to 10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle
speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera
image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe
seal the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while
refueling.
Fuel Filler
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the nozzle and push the fuel door all the way
in to secure it in place.
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using
the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay attention while
backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used
as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the
driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and
indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar
code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front
and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the
vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the
vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR and maximum Payload. If so, weight
must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely
before driving.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in viola-
tion of most state and federal fire regulations and may
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 122.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 122.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR,
maximum payload or the maximum front and rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier
loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's
front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride,
offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic
sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight distributing
(load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
2. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
3. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height H2.
4. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that the
height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above
normal ride height [H1]).
NOTE:
This method is approximate. If available, use scales for
greater accuracy when setting the weight distribution
hitch, especially for trailer loads near or at the maximum
trailer weight rating.
5. The vehicle can now be driven.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow
haul mode engaged (if equipped).
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and
trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,588 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
For the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain see
Ú page 125.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine GCWR Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
3.6L - RWD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lb (4,037 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L - RWD 11,600 lb (5,262 kg) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
3.6L - AWD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lb (4,037 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L - AWD 11,600 lb (5,262 kg) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
5.7L - RWD 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 7,400 lb (3,357 kg) 740 lb (336 kg)
5.7L - AWD 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 7,200 lb (3,266 kg) 720 lb (327 kg)
5.7L - AWD R/T Tow N Go 14,600 lb (6,622 kg) 8,700 lb (3,946 kg) 870 lb (395 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard
Ú page 248. The addition of
passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue
load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW).
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver
cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch
receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the bottom
center of the rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom
of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover
outward (towards you).
Hitch Receiver Cover
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at the
top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing, repeat the procedure in
reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the
bumper fascia prior to installation.
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the
load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total
load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle
Ú
page 252.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled Servicing
Ú page 221. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels
or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will
not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not
fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of
your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK
(P). For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 248.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with electric
trailer brakes and EOH systems. Some previous EOH
systems may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic
brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause
it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them
and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance.
When towing, you should allow for additional space
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for
the specific towing condition and should be changed as
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free environment
at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly
adjusted. See a trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer manufacturer's
instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
correct type of trailer must be selected from the
instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears
on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level
surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer
Ú page 73.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To deter-
mine the type of brakes on your trailer and the avail-
ability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See an authorized dealer if an
aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up
the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
If equipped with Tow N Go, it is recommended to place the
vehicle in tow mode by pushing the TOW button.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions, will improve performance and extend trans-
mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models With Single-Speed Transfer Case All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed Transfer Case
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
Transmission In PARK
Transfer Case In N (Neutral)
Tow In Forward Direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
R
EAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed
ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to
secure the front wheels in the straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — ALL-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — ALL-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS (TWO-SPEED TRANSFER
C
ASE)
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral) and the
transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
The N (Neutral) selection button is adjacent to the transfer case
selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case N (Neutral)
can take place with the selector switch in any position. There
is a Mopar® Flat Tow Harness kit available to enable the
Electronic Power Steering (EPS) while flat towing the vehicle, to
provide more front axle stability. See an authorized dealer for
more information and installation.
NOTE:
If the Mopar® Flat Tow Harness kit is installed, the EPS will
use power from the battery to keep the EPS powered
during a flat tow. A battery charging system is recom-
mended so that the battery is not depleted over a long trip.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with only
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
Before recreational towing, be certain that the
transfer case is fully in N (Neutral)
Ú page 133.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before
pushing the N (Neutral) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
N (Neutral) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds.
The light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL”
message will appear in the instrument cluster.
N (Neutral) Button
5. After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral) light
stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL,
push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine turns off.
11. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
12. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (without
pressing the brake pedal) to turn the ignition to the
OFF mode.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position without first fully engaging the parking brake.
The transfer case N (Neutral) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral) indi-
cator light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the N (Neutral) button is
released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
N (Neutral) Button
7. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off, release
the N (Neutral) button.
8. After the N (Neutral) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
9.
Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the
engine off.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional passenger cars any more than sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case
in N (Neutral) and the engine running. With the transfer
case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine is OFF before
shifting the transmission into PARK.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD Low — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD Low for additional traction.
This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep
snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling power
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4WD Low.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent
damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of
any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution and
maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h)
in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off),
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid
depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as
possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to AWD Low if necessary
Ú page 97. Only shift into a lower gear to maintain forward
motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions
at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to AWD Low. Use
FIRST gear and AWD Low for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and
shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate the
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD Low on dry pavement; driveline
damage may result. 4WD Low locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving in
4WD Low on pavement will cause driveline binding; use
only on wet or slippery surfaces.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL
using only the brake.
4
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction to
complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into AWD Low. Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill
with all four wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and
direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
137
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Display systems, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to
reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
Ú
page 273, or refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a
security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the customer programmable
features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display, push
and hold the Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
For the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu settings screen.
In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access all
of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the
X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
For the Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are English, Español, Italiano,
and Français.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano,
and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting
has the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must
be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must
be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Units
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are “ABCDEF” Keyboard,
“QWERTY” Keyboard, and “AZERTY” Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano,
and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with
the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must
be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must
be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the unit display. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance”
(mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will change the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Hey Uconnect” and “Hey Dodge”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow voice barge-in to be turned on and off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on and off.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the
electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings This setting will direct you to the Navigation settings within Navigation Mode.
Setting Name Description
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start”
setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the Audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Automatic Emergency Braking
This setting will take you to the selectable options for “Forward Collision Warning” and “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity”.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will
have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting
will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Active Lane Management Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available
settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver by vibrating the steering wheel and moving the steering wheel when a lane departure
is detected. The available options within Active Lane Management are Lane Management “Vibration Only”, “Steering
Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”; Lane Warning “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”; Vibration Strength “Low”,
“Medium” and “High”; and Steering Assist Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and can provide both an audible
chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting
will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default This setting will change the Electric Power setting to “Normal”,” Sport”, or “Comfort”.
Paddle Shifters This setting will turn the paddle shifters on or off.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available
settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense Submenu
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rear Seat Alert
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running, or if the engine is turned on
within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Setting Name Description
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Units
Clock/Clock & Date
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
When the Clock/Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
Phone/Bluetooth®
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be
available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply
Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options
This setting will change the voice type during a Voice Recognition session. The available options are “Male” and “Female”.
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio
description from the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List.
The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Wake Up Word This setting will change the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Hey Uconnect” and “Hey Dodge”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will turn the Voice Barge-in function on or off.
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which icons
display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Trailer
Camera
When the Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations can be used to save different
trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”,
“Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name
from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, equipment, flatbed, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel,
and utility.
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
Lights
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission
gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission
is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Doors & Locks
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the
horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock/1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors.
The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. Selectable settings are “On” and “Off”.
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
Key Off/Engine Off Options
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been
activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start”
setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started. If equipped, the only selectable option will be “With Vehicle Start”.
When the Key Off /Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the
ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the
electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker
icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the
vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio
This setting will turn the radio on with vehicle start and recall the last known radio state. The available options are
“On”, “Off”, and “Last Recall”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will let you adjust the volume levels for “Media”, “Phone”, “Navigation”, and “VR” (Voice Recognition).
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches
Notifications
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There are two types: “Latching”
and “Momentary”. The power source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the
“Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at
which the AUX switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are
met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is set to Ignition.
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Favorited” pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Unfavorited” pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-ups on or off.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
SiriusXM® Setup
Accessibility
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles, & Settings This setting will direct you to the SiriusXM® profile settings.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the
12 presets.
Channel Skip This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information.
When the Accessibility button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the option related to the vehicle’s theater system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™
and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the
system will announce “play button selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action.
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
Software Update
System Information — If Equipped
When the Software Update button is selected, the system will display a menu with possible Wi-Fi connections. From this page, you can select and connect to one of the available
Wi-Fi networks to begin system software updates. To begin, make sure the system is set to allow for Wi-Fi updates.
1. Select the desired Wi-Fi network from the available list.
2. Enter the Wi-Fi password. If the password is entered incorrectly, the system will display a notification that the connection failed.
3. Once connected, the system will begin scanning for any system updates. Press the Stop Scan button to end this process.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information When this feature is selected, the radio version build will be displayed.
License Information When this feature is selected, a software license screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the App Drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps This setting will delete all installed Apps on the vehicle.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including
Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will reset the password used for the in-vehicle Wi-Fi.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
5
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch
increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button makes
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on the
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of
the switch once goes to the beginning of the current track, or to
the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds
after the current track begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio.
This condition may be lessened or eliminated by repositioning
the mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is
safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far
less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless
radios may be restricted in some situations or environments,
such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú
page 277.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
157
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notification
of the possible presence of an object, passenger, or pet in
the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to 10 minutes
before the ignition was placed in the ON/RUN position.
RSRA does not directly detect objects, passengers, or pets
in the rear seats. When the previous conditions are met,
RSRA displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to
exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
Ú page 137.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effec-
tiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake
pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
available traction.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability
during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an
emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of
brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying
the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance.
To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required.
If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired
as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that, when equipped, provides torque at
the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in which
the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque
that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help
the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the
correct course of action through small torques on the steering
wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction
to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this
feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque between
the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering
ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel
lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the
vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended
path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and
driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or
striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control
due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only
a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify Traction Control System (TCS) and
ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel
spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
release of the button may toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
attempts may be required to return to "ESC On" mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash
as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced
mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, the ESC
system will be on even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or
NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting see
Ú page 137.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors.
It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is
required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will
not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the
trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the
brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate
the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
ESC are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC cannot
stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations
Ú page 123.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to let
the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system
sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane in
width, on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the B-pillar, and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has
reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in
random false detections on the trailer, and false
chimes when the turn signal is used
Ú page 137.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on the
rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located. The system may also detect blockage if the
vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low radar
returns such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation
drop. If blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will display
in the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and
BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal oper-
ation. The system will automatically recover and
resume function when the condition clears. To mini-
mize system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.) and keep it clear of road contaminations.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the turn
signal is activated during the alert on the side of the
vehicle corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime) alert
can be heard. During the audible (chime) alert, the radio
volume will be reduced
Ú page 165.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 277.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be
blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking
space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP
system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if
an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that
are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued.
In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also
be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when
the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previ-
ously stored mode will be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings
and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does
not take action based upon these progressive warnings,
then the system will provide a limited level of active
braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by
braking and the system determines that the driver intends
to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied suffi-
cient brake force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) detection is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
38 mph (62 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
or partial braking to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW
system will be automatically deactivated
Ú page 277.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 137.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings when the
latter is at a farther distance than the “Medium” setting.
This provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
S
YSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 248 on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold
tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the
recommended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold (parked for
more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F
(-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the
tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warn-
ings have been established for the tire size equipped
on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor
overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the TPMS
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illu-
mination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check the
tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper
pressure
Ú page 277.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors
Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
ment cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX"
message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) in a different color
Ú page 73.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
BAR or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the
pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s)
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warning
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault
is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
The instrument cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds.
This message is then followed by a graphic display, with
“--“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor(s) is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash,
the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will not be present,
and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes.
A system fault can occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
There is no TPMS sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS will
not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install the
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on, a
chime will sound, and the instrument cluster display will
still display a pressure value in the different color graphic
display and an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value. Once you repair or replace the
original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do
not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel
and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 187.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint Ú page 187.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú
page 273 for
customer service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at
all times.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
(Continued)
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is
moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has
completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until
the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in
a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip
and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear
the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep
it snug.
WARNING!
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing
as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position
the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make
sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 195.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occu-
pants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are
using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that
have a harness for restraining the child.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
S
YSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After
the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again
after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag
system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 80.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both
the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on
the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in
all frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the
seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the
Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly and
properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing
a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment.
Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing
child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled
up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will
turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may
affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays
on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do not
make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-
market seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label
Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out
of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with
enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining
the appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags
only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in
all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a
rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or
near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlight washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-
market side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats
used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are
over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight
or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or
height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in
a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height
or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (5 Passenger)
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger) Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions (6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH
system once the combined weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
No — 5 Passenger
N/A — 6 Passenger
No — 7 Passenger
7 and 5 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Five Passenger Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Five Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Five Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain's Chair)
Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting (2nd Row Bench)
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat. To access
them, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap (3rd Row Bench)
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing
child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap.
The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Five Or Seven Passenger
Vehicles Second Row Seating Only
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether —
Five Or Seven Passenger Seating Only
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest
in the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower
the arm rest. The tether is located behind the
armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. This position is not approved for
installing child seats using the LATCH attachments.
You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see
Ú page 195.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 195 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 197 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor
Ú page 175.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward-facing
child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
Installing A Child Restraint With
A Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. For directions to attach a tether anchor,
see
Ú page 197.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install
the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may
need to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame
or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved
for that seating position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See
Ú
page 190 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from
the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap
anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook
to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting (5 Passenger Seating)
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(7 Passenger Seating)
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 87.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 170.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a
floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is
securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip
out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs
to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side
floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle
properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the
accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present)
to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with
the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor
mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle.
Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
203
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
switch bank just below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
SOS And ASSIST Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 277.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G (data)
network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a
10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to
an SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancel-
lation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call
will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to an SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call
system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to
open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occu-
pants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s elec-
trical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer-
gency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.)
to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS
AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
(Continued)
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
NOTE:
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data), 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected to a
representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance will
know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to
get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the
driver’s front tire, block the passenger’s rear tire.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in
rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Load Floor Handle
Lift up on the load floor handle to access the jack and tools
in the cargo area.
Jack And Tools Storage Cover
To remove, press down firmly on the upper tabs of the jack
storage cover to release.
Thumb Screw Location
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
WARNING!
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
Jack Removal
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive”
nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
Spare Tire Location
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear
cargo area on the outside of the vehicle.
For spare tire removal, see the following steps:
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
Winch Plug Location
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle counter-
clockwise until the winch stops.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power
tool may damage the winch.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power
tool may damage the winch.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Winch Location
Wrench Rotation
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear fascia/bumper.
Spare Tire
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle trim, the vehicle may come
equipped with both, a metal retainer and plastic plate or a
metal retainer only when removing the spare
Ú page 259.
5. Pull the metal stamping toward you to release it from
the plastic plate (if equipped).
Spare Tire Retainer
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and
push it through the hole in the plastic plate
(if applicable) and wheel.
Sleeve And Cable
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
(Continued)
7. If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire retainer
and plastic plate. Pinch the three short and two long
tubes to remove the protective plate from the steel
spare wheel.
Releasing Protective Plate
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking
locations.
Jacking Locations
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire.
Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire.
Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station
Ú page 267.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper with the
protective plate facing outward.
Installing Protective Plate On Damaged Wheel
NOTE:
The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel from being
scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective
plate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the
end of the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and
stamped cone shape wheel plate though the road
wheel and protective plate.
Installing Winch
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protective
plate until it is directly under the winch and between the
rear fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat shields.
Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on the winch
extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three times to
make sure the cable is tight.
Wrench Rotation
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable may
result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
14. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools
in the bag underneath the others. Use the hook and
loop fasteners to secure the tool bag to the jack with
the lug wrench on the forward side of the jack.
Expand the jack on the bracket by turning the thumb
screw clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
15. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
in the rear storage bin.
16. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire,
jack and tool kit.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power
tool may damage the winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger's front seat. There are remote terminals
located under the hood to assist in jump starting.
UnderHood Jump Starting Location
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not touch
each other, or either vehicle, before properly connected
for jump starting.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+)
battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
4. Remove the protective cover over the remote
negative
(-) battery post.
5. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables
are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the remote positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
Remote Negative (-) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper
cable to the remote negative
(-)
post (exposed metallic/
unpainted post of the discharge vehicle) located on the
right hand side next to the underhood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative
(-)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective covers over the remote
positive
(+) and negative (-) posts of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
have the battery and charging system tested at an
authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
capless fuel system. The fuel funnel can be found in the
rear cargo area with the jack and tools. If refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert the
refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to
open both flapper doors with the funnel to avoid spills.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 RPM
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and can
damage booster vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear cargo storage area.
Refueling Funnel Location
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to the
HOT (H) position, take the following actions to reduce the
potential for overheating.
On highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
Turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the
A/C off can help remove this heat.
Turn the temperature control to maximum heat and the
blower control to high. This allows the heater core to
act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in
removing heat from the engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
Manual Park Release Cover
NOTE:
Depending on your vehicle’s trim level, the Manual Park
Release cable may be located in a different area on the
center console.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
Release Latch
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release.
In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat
with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating
the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
5. While the metal latch is in the open position, pull
upward on the tether strap until the lever clicks and
latches in the released position. The transmission is
now out of PARK (P) and the vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly
apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply
tension upward while pushing the release latch
towards the tether to unlock the lever.
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever
has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly and
locks into position.
Stowed Position
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often
be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right
and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and
forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing
the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before rocking
the vehicle
Ú page 159. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC OFF button again to restore ESC On mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under
Ú page 131.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment
designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow
bar or other towing device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in
order to move the vehicle can be found on
Ú page 216.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Single-Speed Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions
Ú page 131
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage
to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
7
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels off
the ground) under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For instruc-
tions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when
the engine is off
Ú page 216.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles
(48 km), tow with the rear wheels
OFF
the ground. Acceptable
methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front
wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when
using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front
wheels in the straight position) with the rear wheels raised and
the front wheels
ON
the ground.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may
be towed (in the forward direction, with
ALL wheels on the
ground),
IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in
PARK
Ú page 131.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore
must be towed will
all four wheels
OFF the ground.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 186.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle
Ú
page 187.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
221
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such
as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and pulley, replace if necessary. X
Change transfer case fluid - Normal Usage. X
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
Change transfer case fluid - Severe Usage (police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing).
X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Oil Fill
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light will illuminate and the "Washer
Fluid Low" message will display.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent
only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid
reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
Water will never have to be added, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps
Ú page 212. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 272.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and then
quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is normal
and will not harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is
started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. Other
causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an extended
period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick or if the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the
nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the API.
The manufacturer only recommends API trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil
filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency
for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be
safely discarded in your area.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filter varies
considerably. We recommend using a MOPAR® engine
oil filter. If a MOPAR® engine oil filter is unavailable, only
use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
performance requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 221.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air cleaner
filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine air cleaner
filter cover to the housing assembly.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Spring Clips
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance.
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 221.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating,
the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door. Partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one
side and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door from its
hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip
by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove
compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove
compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on
the right side to fully remove the cover.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover,
make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door hinge
and reattach the tension tether by inserting the tether clip
in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage
the glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove
compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install
the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect
the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode.
You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. This is not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools. We recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat
tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate,
decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar®
Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect
against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless
the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm
pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the
end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless
the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm
pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil changes. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to the manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Carbon
Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO see
Ú page 199.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly.
Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe
internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 221.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 272.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene
glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be
used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact an
authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion
bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local
authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community.
To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to
remain in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 221.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the Brake
System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level
within the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the
brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master
cylinder area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
abnormally low, check the system for leaks. For further
information
Ú
page 272.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid
level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has
no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission
fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage
or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on
the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid
Ú page 272. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid
for your vehicle is also identified on the original
factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture,
use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling
point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 272. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required.
When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior
surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 272.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required.
When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior
surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be inspected.
If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
With the vehicle in a level position, fill the transfer case to
bottom edge of fill plug opening.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
Ú page 272.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 272.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery jump start posts.
This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan *
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
F04 60 Amp Yellow – ESP Pump Non-SRT
F05 40 Amp Green – Air Suspension Comp *
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump SRT
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F08 – – Spare
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Htr * / VAC PUMP *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / EXT Light
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trlr Tow Brake *
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLWR MTR
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 40 Amp Green – LTR Engine Cooling *
F16 – – Spare
F17 30 Amp Pink – HDLP Washers *
F18 – – Spare
F19 20 Amp Blue – Solenoid Headrest *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Pass Door Mod
F21 – – Spare
F22 20 Amp Blue – ECM * / PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – Ft Wiper
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F26 30 Amp Pink – ESP / ECU Valves
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trlr Tow B/U *
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trlr Tow Park *
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trlr Tow Pwr *
F31 – – Spare
F32 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – ELSD *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – EBL
F37 25 Amp Clear – HVAC RR Blower MTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F39 30 Amp Pink – PLG
F40 – 10 Amp Red DRL / HEADLAMP LVL *
F41 – – Spare
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – – Spare
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security MOD
F46 – – Spare
F47 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod * / ELSD *
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN / RF HUB / ESCL *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow LT Turn / Stop *
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 15 Amp Blue PCM *
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Snsrs * / PM Snsrs * / Fuel HTR *
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LT *
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Pump Relay *
F60 – 15 Amp Blue TCM
F61 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils */ Ignition Coil Capacitors*
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / ECM
F65 – – Spare
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof */ LRSM */ RVM / DSRC / USB Port / DTV * / WCP *
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CDM/UCI Port/USB Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper Mtr
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spot Light Feed *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Mtr
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier */ ANCM *
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM * / PCM *
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RT *
F74 – – Spare
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Ctrl *
F76 – 10 Amp Red ESP
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ELSD *
F78 – 10 Amp Red ECM / PCM * / EPS
F79 – – Spare
F80 – 10 Amp Red UGDO
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow RT Turn / Stop *
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Control / DTV *
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension Mod *
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / CSG * / ITBM *
F89 – – Spare
F90 – – Spare
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Pwr Outlet Cargo Area
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rr Console Lamp * / RR Pwr Outlet
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Sbw / Tcase Sw
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rr Cam / Blind Spot Snsr *
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rr Seat Heater Sw*
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rr Htd Sts / Htd Str Wheel *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Htd Sts * / Vent Sts
F99 – 10 Amp Red Hvac / Dash / Hlfm/ Prktronx
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping *
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temp Sensor / Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red PTC / RR HVAC *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUT-IP / Console / Trnk
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam/LED Headlamps LED
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Bulb Reflector) 7444NA
Front DRL/Turn/Park Lamp (Premium) LED
Front DRL/Park Lamp (Base) LED
Front Side Marker Lamps LED
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric condi-
tions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions
change to allow the condensation to change back into a
vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Rotate the turn signal bulb a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The front fog lamps are LEDs. See an authorized dealer for
service.
REAR TAIL, STOP AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED.
See an authorized dealer for replacement.
REAR LIFTGATE MOUNTED BACK-UP LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counterclockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s).
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Front Fog Lamps LED
Rear Tail Lamps/Side Marker Lamps LED
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED
Rear Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp is an LED assembly.
See an authorized dealer for replacement.
REAR LICENSE LAMP
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an authorized dealer
for service.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
EXAMPLE:
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Tire Terminology And Definitions
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 122.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú page 122.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual
to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity
for your vehicle. Never overload them.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
changed after being driven in a Run Flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
Ú page 167.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help
you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear
and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends using tires equivalent to the originals in
size, quality and performance when replacement is needed
Ú
page 257. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard
or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your
tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú page 249.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by
excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure.
A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more
than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do
not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating
other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and
stress to steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 128.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer
for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or
on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions
begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to
the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
RWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Profile Or Equivalent)
SPECIAL SERVICE
Rear
P265/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT
R/T
CITADEL
265/50R20
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Profile Or Equivalent)
PURSUIT
Rear
255/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT
R/T
CITADEL
265/50R20
R/T w/Tow N Go 295/45ZR20
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 221. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate
the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle
position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Auto-
sock traction devices do not require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in
snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal
in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to
airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts if
they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision
Care Program facility for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
267
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner
of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Base Model Vehicle
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service
station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane number,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause
for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with
a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine
failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality unleaded
regular gasoline having a posted octane number of
87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane premium gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy
and performance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane plus
gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 269
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions
to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage
to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components.
Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 271
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 24.6 gal 93 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 qt 5.6 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 10.4 qt 9.9 L
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 11 qt 10.4 L
5.7L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 15.4 qt 14.6 L
5.7L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 16 qt 15.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 227.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method , 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) – Without
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
273
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner
of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc. Medford, MA
02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services are provided by Cross
Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
10
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/fuel
delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a result of a
mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA: 1-800-521-2779/
Canada: 800-363-4869. Provide your name, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) required for covered services,
license plate number, and your location, including the
telephone number from which you are calling. Briefly describe
the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.
You will be given the name of the service provider and an
estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within 30 days of
the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and
customary charges for that service in the area where they
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be
mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by FCA
US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result
of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 275
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US
LLC has installed special Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by dialing
1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help
protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after FCA
US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US
LLC to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call FCA
US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
10
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian
customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP
.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how
to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 277
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
10
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 267
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ................................................... 103
, 105
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 235
Adding Fuel................................................................... 121
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 269
Adjust
Down...........................................................................31
Forward ......................................................................31
Rearward....................................................................31
Up................................................................................31
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 179
Air Bag Warning Light ....................................177
, 179
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 183
Enhanced Accident Response ......................186
, 220
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 220
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 179
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 185
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 182
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 186
Maintenance........................................................... 186
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 177
Side Air Bags........................................................... 183
Transporting Pets.................................................... 200
Air Bag Light .................................................81
, 177, 200
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 228
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 229
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 229
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 229
Air Conditioning
Rear............................................................................ 52
Air Conditioning Filter .................................. 54
, 228, 229
Air Conditioning System ................................................. 53
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................................54
Air Filter .........................................................................228
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................255
Alarm
Arm The System.................................................. 19
, 20
Disarm The System ................................................... 20
Rearm The System....................................................20
Security Alarm............................................................ 83
Alarm System
Security Alarm............................................................ 19
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................................................97
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 235
, 271
Disposal ...................................................................236
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................157
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................................................. 83
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................161
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................137
Auto Down Power Windows............................................63
Automatic Headlights .....................................................43
Automatic High Beams................................................... 43
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 53
Automatic Transmission ......................................... 89
, 94
Adding Fluid............................................................. 238
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................238
Fluid Change ...........................................................238
Fluid Level Check.................................................... 237
Fluid Type .......................................................238
, 272
Special Additives..................................................... 237
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ................. 96
Auxiliary Driving Systems............................................. 162
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 59
Auxiliary Power Outlet .................................................... 59
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 272
B
Battery.................................................................... 81, 226
Charging System Light.............................................. 81
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 14
Battery Saver Feature .................................................... 45
Belts, Seat.....................................................................200
Blind Spot Monitoring .................................................. 162
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 231
B-Pillar Location ...........................................................252
Brake Assist System..................................................... 158
Brake Control System, Electronic................................158
Brake Fluid...........................................................237
, 272
Brake System ......................................................237
, 267
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................267
Fluid Check.............................................................. 237
Master Cylinder .......................................................237
Parking....................................................................... 92
Warning Light ............................................................ 81
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
279
Brake/Transmission Interlock........................................94
Bulb Replacement ..............................................246
, 247
Bulbs, Light................................................................... 201
C
Camera, Rear ............................................................... 120
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 271
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 224
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 236
Car Washes .................................................................. 264
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 202
Cargo Area Cover ............................................................67
Cargo Compartment .......................................................67
Light............................................................................67
Luggage Carrier..........................................................68
Cargo Light ......................................................................67
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................................67
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 156
Center High Mounted Stop Light................................. 248
Certification Label........................................................ 122
Chains, Tire................................................................... 261
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 249
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........88
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 199
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 199
Child Restraint.............................................................. 187
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 189
Child Seat Installation ............................................ 197
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt................. 195
Infant And Child Restraints.....................................188
Locating The LATCH Anchorages............................192
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............190
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................188
Seating Positions.....................................................190
Child Safety Locks ..........................................................23
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................268
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................260
Climate Control ...............................................................48
Automatic................................................................... 48
Cold Weather Operation.................................................92
Compact Spare Tire......................................................259
Contract, Service ..........................................................275
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................236
Cooling System .............................................................235
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................235
Cooling Capacity......................................................271
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................236
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................235
Inspection ................................................................235
Points To Remember...............................................236
Pressure Cap ...........................................................236
Radiator Cap............................................................236
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........235
, 271, 272
Corrosion Protection.....................................................264
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .......................... 103
, 105
Cruise Light ..............................................................86
, 87
Customer Assistance....................................................273
Cybersecurity ................................................................137
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 43
Defroster, Windshield ..................................................200
De-Icer, Remote Start .................................................... 19
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................................... 87
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 226
Disabled Vehicle Towing .............................................. 219
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).................................... 236
Door Ajar .................................................................. 81
, 82
Door Ajar Light......................................................... 81
, 82
Door Locks............................................................... 20
, 23
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ............... 23
Doors............................................................................... 20
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt.................................................... 26
Driving ...........................................................................134
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode .................................................... 94
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 158
Anti-Lock Brake System.......................................... 157
Electronic Roll Mitigation...............................159
, 162
Electric Remote Mirrors ................................................. 38
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..................... 59
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................. 104
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................159
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light..................... 82
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ...................... 97
, 98
Emergency Gas Can Refueling .................................... 214
11
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................................. 218
Hazard Warning Flasher......................................... 203
Jacking..................................................................... 205
Jump Starting.......................................................... 212
Emission Control System Maintenance.........................88
Engine........................................................................... 224
Air Cleaner............................................................... 228
Break-In Recommendations .....................................92
Checking Oil Level .................................................. 226
Compartment.................................................224
, 225
Compartment Identification .......................... 224
, 225
Cooling..................................................................... 235
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................................. 202
Fails To Start ..............................................................91
Flooded, Starting .......................................................91
Fuel Requirements ........................................ 268
, 271
Jump Starting.......................................................... 212
Oil.................................................................... 227
, 271
Oil Filler Cap ............................................................ 224
Oil Filter ................................................................... 228
Oil Selection ..........................................227
, 271, 272
Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 227
Starting.......................................................................89
Engine Oil Life Reset
b
...............................................75
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 186
, 220
Ethanol.......................................................................... 269
Exhaust Gas Cautions.................................................. 202
Exhaust System................................................... 202
, 234
Exterior Lights............................................... 42
, 201, 246
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................228
Air Conditioning ...................................... 54
, 228, 229
Engine Oil.................................................................228
Engine Oil Disposal..................................................227
Flashers.........................................................................203
Hazard Warning.......................................................203
Turn Signals............................................ 86
, 201, 247
Flash-To-Pass..................................................................43
Flooded Engine Starting................................................. 91
Fluid Capacities ............................................................271
Fluid Leaks ....................................................................201
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................................237
Engine Oil.................................................................226
Fluids And Lubricants...................................................272
Fog Lights......................................................................247
Fog Lights, Service........................................................247
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................ 26
Folding Rear Seats ......................................................... 28
Forward Collision Warning ...........................................165
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.............................................203
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................218
Front Axle (Differential) ................................................238
Fuel................................................................................268
Additives...................................................................269
Clean Air...................................................................268
Economy Mode.......................................................... 94
Ethanol.....................................................................269
Gasoline ...................................................................268
Materials Added ......................................................269
Methanol..................................................................269
Octane Rating.......................................................... 268
Requirements.................................................268
, 271
Specifications..........................................................272
Tank Capacity..........................................................271
Fueling ..........................................................................121
Fuses............................................................................. 239
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).................................. 38
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................ 268
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................................268
Gasoline, Reformulated...............................................268
Gear Ranges ................................................................... 95
Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 266
Gross Axle Weight Rating............................................. 123
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .......................................123
GVWR ............................................................................122
H
Hazard Warning Flashers............................................. 203
Head Restraints.............................................................. 33
Headlights
Automatic .................................................................. 43
Cleaning................................................................... 264
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...................... 43
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 44
On With Wipers.......................................................... 44
Passing ...................................................................... 43
Heated Mirrors ............................................................... 38
Heated Seats.................................................................. 32
Heated Steering Wheel.................................................. 25
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 161
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
281
Hitches
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 125
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................................38
Hood Prop........................................................................65
Hood Release ..................................................................65
I
Ignition.............................................................................16
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ...................................16
Key Fob Not Detected ...............................................16
Keyless Ignition..........................................................16
Keyless Push Button .................................................16
Push Button Ignition..................................................16
Switch .........................................................................16
Illuminated Entry.............................................................46
Immobilizer (Sentry Key).................................................15
Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 37
, 203
Instrument Cluster ...................................................72
, 73
Display..........................................................73
, 74, 76
Menu Items ................................................................77
Instrument Cluster
b
..................................................73
Instrument Cluster Display
Audio...........................................................................79
Driver Assist ...............................................................78
Messages ...................................................................79
Screen Setup .............................................................79
Speedometer .............................................................77
Trailer Tow..................................................................78
Trip..............................................................................78
Vehicle Info.................................................................77
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 266
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ................................. 128
Interior And Instrument Lights .......................................45
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 265
Interior Lights.................................................................. 45
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...............................47
Inverter
Power ......................................................................... 61
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ..................................................57
J
Jack Location ................................................................206
Jack Operation ..............................................................209
Jacking And Tire Changing
b
...................................205
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions ......................206
Jacking Instructions......................................................209
Jump Starting................................................................212
K
Key Fob............................................................................ 13
Arm The System......................................................... 19
Disarm The System ................................................... 20
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 15
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........14
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry)............15
Keyless Enter 'n Go™
Passive Entry .............................................................21
Passive Entry Programming...................................... 21
Keys................................................................................. 13
Replacement ............................................................. 15
Sentry (Immobilizer) .................................................. 15
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................................44
LaneSense ....................................................................118
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................171
Latches..........................................................................201
Hood........................................................................... 65
Lead Free Gasoline ...................................................... 268
Leaks, Fluid...................................................................201
Life Of Tires...................................................................257
Liftgate ............................................................................ 66
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .................................... 48
Light Bulbs....................................................................201
Lights............................................................................. 201
Air Bag......................................................81
, 177, 200
Automatic Headlights ............................................... 43
AWD ........................................................................... 85
Brake Assist Warning.............................................. 160
Brake Warning........................................................... 81
Bulb Replacement .........................................246
, 247
Cargo.......................................................................... 67
Center Mounted Stop ............................................. 248
Cruise........................................................... 84
, 86, 87
Daytime Running....................................................... 43
Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................................ 42
Electric Power Steering............................................. 81
Electronic Stability Control ....................................... 83
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ............ 82
Exterior.............................................................. 42
, 201
Fog .................................................................... 86
, 247
Forward Collision Warning................................. 84
, 85
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................203
Headlights On With Wipers....................................... 44
High Beam................................................................. 87
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 43
Hood Open................................................................. 82
Interior ....................................................................... 45
LaneSense................................................... 83
, 86, 87
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 44
Low Fuel..................................................................... 83
11
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)......................84
NEUTRAL ....................................................................85
Oil Temperature .........................................................82
Park .....................................................................43
, 86
Passing .......................................................................43
Reading ......................................................................45
Rear Servicing......................................................... 247
Rear Tail Lamps...................................................... 247
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................................80
Security Alarm............................................................83
Service............................................................246
, 247
Service AWD...............................................................84
Side Marker............................................................. 247
Sport Mode.................................................................86
Stop Start ............................................................84
, 86
Traction Control ...................................................... 160
Trailer Brake Disconnected.......................................82
Transmission Temperature.......................................82
Turn Signals ..................................... 42
, 86, 201, 247
Vanity Mirror...............................................................37
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions................82
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................................79
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................................79
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction............................79
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor............................79
Loading Vehicle............................................................ 122
Tires ......................................................................... 252
Locks
Child Protection .........................................................23
Manual .......................................................................20
Power Door.................................................................21
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 231
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 267
Luggage Carrier...............................................................68
M
Maintenance................................................................... 65
Maintenance Free Battery ...........................................226
Maintenance Schedule ................................................221
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)........... 84
, 88
Manual
Service .....................................................................276
Memory Feature (Memory Seats).................................. 25
Memory Seat................................................................... 25
Memory Seats And Radio...............................................25
Methanol .......................................................................269
Mirrors .............................................................................37
Electric Remote ......................................................... 38
Exterior Folding.......................................................... 37
Heated........................................................................ 38
Outside.......................................................................37
Rearview ...........................................................37
, 203
Vanity.......................................................................... 37
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.......................................................................... 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................167
Mopar Parts ..................................................................276
Multi-Function Control Lever.......................................... 42
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period.......................................... 92
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................170
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ....................................268
Oil Change Indicator .......................................................75
Reset .......................................................................... 75
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................228
Oil Filter, Selection .......................................................228
Oil Pressure Light ........................................................... 82
Oil, Engine.....................................................................227
Capacity ...................................................................271
Checking..................................................................226
Dipstick....................................................................226
Disposal................................................................... 227
Filter.........................................................................228
Filter Disposal..........................................................227
Identification Logo ..................................................227
Materials Added To.................................................227
Pressure Warning Light ............................................ 82
Recommendation...........................................227
, 271
Synthetic..................................................................227
Viscosity...................................................................271
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................................... 87
Operating Precautions ................................................... 87
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ...................................................... 276
Outside Rearview Mirrors .............................................. 37
P
Paint Care ..................................................................... 264
Parking Brake ................................................................. 92
ParkSense System, Rear ............................................. 113
Passive Entry .................................................................. 21
Performance ................................................................... 77
Pets ............................................................................... 200
Pinch Protection ............................................................. 65
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......................252
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
283
Power
Brakes ..................................................................... 267
Distribution Center (Fuses).................................... 239
Door Locks .................................................................21
Inverter .......................................................................61
Liftgate .......................................................................66
Mirrors ........................................................................38
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............................59
Seats...........................................................................31
Steering .......................................................... 101
, 272
Sunroof.......................................................................64
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............................24
Windows .....................................................................62
Power Seats
Down...........................................................................31
Forward ......................................................................31
Rearward....................................................................31
Up................................................................................31
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 175
Preparation For Jacking............................................... 206
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................................ 175
R
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 256
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 236
Radio Operation ........................................................... 156
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 156
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................47
Rear Air Conditioning ......................................................52
Rear Axle (Differential)................................................. 238
Rear Camera ................................................................ 120
Rear Cross Path............................................................164
Rear ParkSense System...............................................113
Rear Seat Reminder Alert ............................................157
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................................ 28
Rear Wiper/Washer........................................................ 48
Reclining Front Seats .....................................................27
Recreational Towing .....................................................131
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)..................133
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N)..............134
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................268
Refrigerant ....................................................................229
Release, Hood................................................................. 65
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................171
Remote Control
Starting System ......................................................... 17
Remote Keyless Entry ....................................................13
Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 19
Disarm The Alarm...................................................... 20
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 15
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................156
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode............................................18
Remote Starting System ................................................ 17
Replacement Bulbs ......................................................246
Replacement Keys.......................................................... 15
Replacement Tires........................................................257
Reporting Safety Defects .............................................276
Restraints, Child ...........................................................187
Restraints, Head.............................................................33
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ....................................... 67
Roll Over Warning ............................................................. 8
Roof Type Carrier ............................................................ 68
Rotation, Tires...............................................................262
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................200
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle....................................201
Safety Defects, Reporting............................................ 276
Safety Information, Tire ...............................................248
Safety Tips .................................................................... 199
Safety, Exhaust Gas .....................................................202
Schedule, Maintenance...............................................221
Seat Belt Reminder........................................................ 80
Seat Belts.............................................................170
, 200
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................174
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..................174
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage..........174
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................175
Child Restraints.......................................................187
Energy Management Feature.................................175
Extender................................................................... 174
Front Seat............................................. 170
, 171, 173
Inspection................................................................200
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................................. 173
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................173
Lap/Shoulder Belts................................................. 171
Operating Instructions ............................................173
Pregnant Women .................................................... 175
Pretensioners ..........................................................175
Rear Seat.................................................................171
Reminder ................................................................. 171
Seat Belt Extender .................................................. 174
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 175
Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 173
Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 265
11
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284
Seats..................................................................26, 31, 32
Adjustment...................................................26
, 27, 31
Easy Entry...................................................................32
Heated........................................................................32
Memory.......................................................................25
Rear Folding........................................................26
, 28
Reclining.....................................................................27
Seatback Release......................................................26
Tilting ..........................................................................26
Vented ........................................................................33
Ventilated ...................................................................33
Security Alarm
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System....................................................20
Security System........................................................19
, 83
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................15
Sentry Key Replacement ................................................15
Service Assistance ....................................................... 273
Service Contract........................................................... 275
Service Manuals........................................................... 276
Shifting.............................................................................93
Automatic Transmission.....................................93
, 94
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 171
Signals, Turn................................................. 86
, 201, 247
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 261
Snow Tires .................................................................... 258
Spare Tires .................................................207
, 259, 260
Speed Control
Accel/Decel............................................................. 104
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)........................................... 108
Cancel...................................................................... 104
Resume ................................................................... 104
Set............................................................................ 104
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................103
, 104, 105
Starting............................................................................ 89
Button.........................................................................16
Cold Weather .............................................................92
Engine Fails To Start .................................................91
Remote.......................................................................17
Starting And Operating................................................... 89
Starting Procedures........................................................89
Steering ........................................................................... 24
Power .......................................................................101
Tilt Column................................................................. 24
Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 25
Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 24
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................156
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls .....156
Storage ............................................................................ 55
Storage, Vehicle.....................................................54
, 264
Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................264
Sun Roof................................................................... 64
, 65
Sun Visor ......................................................................... 37
Sunglasses Storage........................................................56
Sunshade Operation.......................................................64
Sway Control, Trailer.....................................................162
Symbol Glossary ............................................................... 9
Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................227
System
Vehicle Security ......................................................... 19
System, Remote Starting ............................................... 17
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................................ 24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 53
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................................................. 67
Tilt Steering Column .......................................................24
Tire And Loading Information Placard.........................252
Tire Markings................................................................248
Tire Safety Information ................................................248
Tires................................................... 201
, 255, 259, 262
Aging (Life Of Tires).................................................257
Air Pressure .............................................................255
Chains...................................................................... 261
Changing..................................................................205
Compact Spare........................................................259
General Information.......................................255
, 259
High Speed .............................................................. 256
Inflation Pressure....................................................255
Life Of Tires ............................................................. 257
Load Capacity..........................................................252
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).............. 84
, 167
Quality Grading........................................................262
Radial....................................................................... 256
Replacement ........................................................... 257
Rotation ...................................................................262
Safety..............................................................248
, 255
Sizes.........................................................................249
Snow Tires ...............................................................258
Spare Tires ........................................... 207
, 259, 260
Spinning...................................................................257
Trailer Towing ..........................................................128
Tread Wear Indicators ............................................257
Wheel Nut Torque ................................................... 267
To Open Hood ................................................................. 65
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight..................................... 127
Tow N Go....................................................................... 100
Towing ..................................................................123
, 219
Disabled Vehicle......................................................219
Guide........................................................................125
Recreational ............................................................ 131
Weight...................................................................... 125
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 131
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
285
Traction Control............................................................ 162
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 162
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 123
Hitches .................................................................... 125
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 127
Tips .......................................................................... 131
Trailer And Tongue Weight..................................... 127
Wiring....................................................................... 130
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 125
Trailer Weight ............................................................... 125
Transfer Case ............................................................... 238
Electronically Shifted..........................................97
, 98
Fluid......................................................................... 272
Maintenance........................................................... 238
Transmission ...................................................................94
Automatic ......................................................... 94
, 237
Fluid......................................................................... 272
Maintenance........................................................... 237
Shifting .......................................................................93
Transporting Pets......................................................... 200
Tread Wear Indicators ................................................. 257
Turn Signals........................................................... 86
, 247
U
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features.......................... 21
Uniform Tire Quality Grades.........................................262
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
If Equipped
b
..............................................................38
Unleaded Gasoline .......................................................268
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................173
V
Vanity Mirrors..................................................................37
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................267
Vehicle Loading................................................... 122
, 252
Vehicle Maintenance....................................................227
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................................... 9
Vehicle Security System .................................................19
Vehicle Storage......................................................54
, 264
Voice Command..............................................................35
Voice Recognition System (VR)......................................35
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................................203
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions)....... 83
Warnings, Roll Over...........................................................8
Warranty Information ...................................................275
Washers, Windshield ............................................46
, 226
Washing Vehicle ........................................................... 264
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................260
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.......................................... 260
Wind Buffeting................................................................ 63
Window Fogging ............................................................. 54
Windows.......................................................................... 62
Power ......................................................................... 62
Reset Auto-Up............................................................ 63
Windshield Defroster ...................................................200
Windshield Washers .............................................46
, 226
Fluid .........................................................................226
Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 231
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 46
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................231
Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 47
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 47
Wireless Charging Pad ................................................... 61
11
23_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public
transportation.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation,
pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling
your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the
ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
SECOND EDITION
23_WD_OM_EN_USC
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om
U. S.
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
©2022 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE
DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS. APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
